JP6926050B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set set value. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be appropriately executed. ..

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a setting confirmation operation.

(A) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game by firing a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process) that can control the setting value set by the setting means to a setting confirmation state that can be confirmed, and
A variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes into a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
A variable time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a change period for changing the variable means to the first state, and
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the game medium passing through the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
A normal variable time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring a normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect according to the end of the advantageous state, and a notification effect execution means.
A notification timing means for measuring the notification period in which the notification effect is executed, and
It is provided with an external output means capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall).
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state even when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing that can execute the processing related to the game is executed.
The interrupt process is executed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and after the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The setting confirmation state ends when the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state. The timekeeping of the change period is interrupted until, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the change period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 is set when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state). Stops the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the control of the confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the normal symbol). Stops the timekeeping of the normal map fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
The setting confirmation state ends when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the notification period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state. The timing of the notification period is interrupted until, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timing of the notification period is restarted.
The external output means can output the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state (for example, a security signal is output when controlled to the setting confirmation state).
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the launch of the game medium is restricted.
It is characterized by that. According to this feature, the setting confirmation work can be suitably executed when the setting confirmation is desired to be performed immediately.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
An effect movable body (for example, an effect movable body 4AK001L) that can be changed into a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second aspect (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R) and
Hold storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can store information related to variable display as hold storage, and
A hold display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a hold display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun) corresponding to the hold storage. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120) that displays a hold display.
The movable body for production is
When the hold display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
When the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
The case where the hold display is displayed in the second display mode is more likely to change to the second mode than the case where the hold display is displayed in the first display mode (for example, FIG. 8-6). (D))
Moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU103) capable of advancing the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on information from the game control means (for example, an effect control command), and
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the setting change operation is executed), the setting change means (for example, the CPU 103) that can control the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed executes the setting change value change process. Part) and
The effect control means can cause a predetermined effect means (for example, an image display device 5) to execute an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) that specifies that variable display is to be executed.
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on the information designating to execute the variable display when controlled to the setting change state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control. The CPU 120 does not execute control based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command because it discards the fluctuation pattern designation command even if it receives the fluctuation pattern designation command while being controlled to the setting change state).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

(2) Other gaming machines according to the present invention
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
An effect movable body (for example, an effect movable body 4AK001L) that can be changed into a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second aspect (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R) and
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for displaying an active display on an image display device 5) is provided.
The specific display means can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun).
The movable body for production is
When the specific display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
When the specific display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
The case where the specific display is displayed in the second display mode is more likely to change to the second mode than the case where the specific display is displayed in the first display mode (for example, FIG. 8-6). (D))
Moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU103) capable of advancing the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on information from the game control means (for example, an effect control command), and
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player.
Based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, the setting confirmation operation is executed), the setting confirmation means (for example, the CPU 103) that can control the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed executes the setting variable value confirmation process. Part) and
The effect control means may cause a predetermined effect means (for example, an image display device 5 and a game effect lamp 9) to execute an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) that specifies that variable display is to be executed. It is possible and
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on the information specifying that the variable display is to be executed when the setting confirmation state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control. The CPU 120 does not execute control based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command because it discards the fluctuation pattern designation command even if it receives the fluctuation pattern designation command while being controlled to the setting confirmation state).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The movable body for effect is more likely to display the hold display (specific display) in the first display mode than to display the hold display (specific display) in the second display mode. It may be easy to change to the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The hold display means (specific display means) is capable of displaying the hold display (specific display) so that the operation of the hold display (specific display) corresponds to the operation of the effect movable body. May be good.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The movable body for production is
It is provided so that players can contact it.
The temperature can be changed to a plurality of stages, and the temperature may be changed to a higher temperature in the second aspect than in the first aspect (for example, 8-6 (B)).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The period required for the change may be different depending on whether the movable body for production changes to the first aspect or changes to the second aspect.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
An operation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for controlling the operation of the effect control movable body is provided.
In the motion control means, the operation of the effect movable body is performed during the period from when the operation of the effect movable body is suggested by the hold display (specific display) until the operation of the effect movable body is executed. Operations other than the above may be restricted (for example, when it is determined in step 4AKS002 that the pre-reading notice is already being executed, a new pre-reading notice or a movable body motion suggestion is not executed).
According to such a configuration, the progress of the production can be smoothly performed.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step 120AKSA12), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
Setting control means that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01, 120AKSA02). When,
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member that operates by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member that operates by the operation motor AK014, the effect movable body 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.)
At least, a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and a control for an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes command processing when the power of AKS012 is turned on.
The movable control means may control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) when the change permission state is set.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed when the change permission state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step 120AKSA12), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
Setting control means that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01, 120AKSA02). When,
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member that operates by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member that operates by the operation motor AK014, the effect movable body 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.)
At least, it is provided with a movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a command process at power-on in step AKS012) capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position.
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
In the change permission state, the control to execute the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means (10) to (14). Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 in a gaming machine,
Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, a command indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is transmitted from the main board side to the effect control board side, and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. It was informed that it was. In such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement because the countermeasures against the reception of irregular commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state are insufficient.

(10) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A game control means (for example, CPU103) capable of advancing the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on information from the game control means (for example, an effect control command), and
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the setting change operation is executed), the setting change means (for example, the CPU 103) that can control the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed executes the setting change value change process. Part) and
The effect control means can cause a predetermined effect means (for example, an image display device 5) to execute an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) that specifies that variable display is to be executed.
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on the information designating to execute the variable display when controlled to the setting change state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control. The CPU 120 does not execute control based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command because it discards the fluctuation pattern designation command even if it receives the fluctuation pattern designation command while being controlled to the setting change state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

(11) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A game control means (for example, CPU103) capable of advancing the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on information from the game control means (for example, an effect control command), and
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player.
Based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, the setting confirmation operation is executed), the setting confirmation means (for example, the CPU 103) that can control the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed executes the setting variable value confirmation process. Part) and
The effect control means may cause a predetermined effect means (for example, an image display device 5 and a game effect lamp 9) to execute an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) that specifies that variable display is to be executed. It is possible and
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on the information specifying that the variable display is to be executed when the setting confirmation state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control. The CPU 120 does not execute control based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command because it discards the fluctuation pattern designation command even if it receives the fluctuation pattern designation command while being controlled to the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (10) to (11) above,
It is possible to analyze the information from the game control means until the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is completed, and then discard the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3). The effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command such as 40FS021).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(13) In any of the gaming machines (10) to (12) above,
The effect control means
Based on the setting change start information (for example, the setting value change start notification command) accompanying the start of the setting change state from the game control means, the setting change information indicating that the setting change state is controlled is set (for example). For example, set to display an image that notifies that the setting has been changed),
Based on the setting confirmation start information (for example, the setting value confirmation start notification command) accompanying the start of the setting confirmation state from the game control means, the setting confirmation information indicating that the setting confirmation state is controlled is set (for example). For example, set to display an image notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it can be shown that the control is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a predetermined effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the means from malfunctioning.

(14) In any of the gaming machines (10) to (13) above,
The predetermined effect means executes an operation based on the operation confirmation information even when controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state (for example, as shown in 40FS020 of FIG. 13-3). Even when it is controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the control according to the test command is executed).

According to such a configuration, even when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the operation of the predetermined effect means based on the operation confirmation information can be executed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the movable body for production which concerns on a feature part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the functional structure of the movable body for production which concerns on a feature part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 4AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pre-reading notice setting process which concerns on a feature part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the look-ahead notice setting process which concerns on a feature part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the pre-reading notice setting process which concerns on the modification of the feature part 4AK. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at power-on. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on in the modification which concerns on the feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the display example of the setting confirmation notification screen which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when an abnormal setting value error occurs or when the power is restored from the power failure during the setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display device when it recovers from the power failure during setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in the operation of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of a set value and the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the number of executions of the 1st movable body initialization theory and the 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing in a feature part 10F. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command in a feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing in a feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side game stop processing in a feature part 40F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 4AK)
Subsequently, the feature unit 4AK will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion 4AK is provided with the effect movable body 4AK001L and 4AK001R as a movable body that operates according to the effect. The effect movable body 4AK001L is provided at the upper left position of the gaming machine frame 3, and the effect movable body 4AK001R is provided at the upper right position of the game machine frame 3. The production movable body 4AK001L and the production movable body 4AK001R are collectively referred to as the production movable body 4AK001. The effect movable body 4AK001 is provided so as to be able to execute a projecting (advancing) operation toward the outside (left-right diagonally upward direction) of the gaming machine frame 3. In this way, the movable body 4AK001 for production can operate so as to change the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion 4AK, the speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the lower left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

Next, an operation example of the effect movable body 4AK001L and 4AK001R will be described with reference to FIG. 8-1. FIG. 8-1 (A) shows the case where the effect movable body 4AK001 is in the origin position (position before operation), and FIG. 8-1 (B) shows the effect movable body 4AK001 in the advanced position (half protruding). The case where the movable body 4AK001 for production is in the post-operation position (the position where it protrudes to the maximum) is shown in FIG. 8-1 (C).

As shown in FIGS. 8-1 (A) to 8-1 (C), in the effect movable body 4AK001, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 constituting the effect movable body 4AK001 is placed on the outside of the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It is designed to protrude (advance) toward.

When the movable body 4AK001 for production is in the origin position (position before operation) as shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is completely housed in the gaming machine frame 3. Become.

In the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, for example, the motor included in the effect movable body 4AK001 rotates in the normal direction and the drive gear rotates in the normal direction, so that the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 protrudes outward. Further, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 retracts into the gaming machine frame 3 in response to the reverse operation of the motor and the reverse rotation of the drive gear.

It should be noted that the effect movable body 4AK001L and the effect movable body 4AK001R can transmit control signals to each of them, and the operation of each of them can be controlled. Therefore, the effect movable body 4AK001L and the effect movable body 4AK001R can simultaneously perform the same operations (protruding operation, retracting operation), and it is also possible to operate only one of them. For example, the effect movable body 4AK001L and the effect movable body 4AK001R can be operated so as to project alternately. Further, the movable body 4AK001L for production and the movable body 4AK001R for production are capable of vibration operation and temperature control, but these operations and control can also be performed one by one. By doing so, various production operations can be realized.

FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a functional configuration of the effect movable body 4AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the effect movable body 4AK001 (the effect movable body 4AK001L and the effect movable body 4AK001R) includes a rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, a drive unit 4AK011, a position detector 4AK012, a touch sensor 4AK013, and a vibration drive unit. It is composed of 4AK014 and a temperature control unit 4AK015. The effect movable body 4AK001 is connected to the effect control board 12, and operates under the control of the effect control CPU 120.

The rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is a rod-shaped member (accessory) that performs a protruding operation as shown in FIG. 8-1 in the effect movable body 4AK001.

The drive unit 4AK011 is composed of a motor, a drive gear, a belt, and the like, and performs a projecting operation of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 and a storing operation for ending the projecting. The drive unit 4AK011 drives the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 based on the control signal from the effect control board 12, and executes a projecting operation or a retracting operation.

In the position detector 4AK012, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is located at the origin position (the state where the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is completely retracted) or the post-operation position (the position where the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 protrudes to the maximum, the position where the protrusion operation is completed). It is composed of sensors (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, a button) that can detect the presence. The position detector 4AK012 can grasp the current position of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, and can determine whether or not the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is operating normally.

The touch sensor 4AK013 is a sensor (for example, a capacitive touch sensor or a pressure sensitive sensor) that can detect that a player has come into contact with the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010. Be done. The position detector 4AK012 and the touch sensor 4AK013 can transmit the detection result to the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, the contact-type touch sensor 4AK013 detects that the player has come into contact with the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, but the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is detected by a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor. It may be possible to detect or infer that the player has come into contact with the object 4AK010.

Since the effectable movable body 4AK001 is provided at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3, the player can contact the movable body 4AK001. When the touch sensor 4AK013 detects contact with the movable body 4AK001 (rod-shaped accessory 4AK010) during the operation of the movable body 4AK001 for the effect, the safety can be ensured or the effect can be achieved depending on the frequency, strength, and timing of the contact. In order to prevent damage or failure of the movable body 4AK001, the operation may be stopped, an error notification or a warning may be given.

The vibration drive unit 4AK014 is composed of a vibration motor or the like built in the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, and vibrates the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010. The vibration drive unit 4AK014 vibrates the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 based on the control signal from the effect control board 12. The drive unit 4AK011 may be used to vibrate the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010.

The temperature control unit 4AK015 is composed of a thermoelectric element (for example, a Pertier element) built in the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, and heats and cools the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010. The rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is composed of a heat transfer member such as metal in order to enable temperature control by the temperature control unit 4AK015. When the player comes into contact with the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, the temperature change can be experienced, so that the production becomes diverse.

A temperature sensor for monitoring the temperature of the effect movable body 4AK001 (particularly the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010) may be provided. When the temperature of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is equal to or higher than a predetermined upper limit threshold value or lower than the lower limit threshold value, the operation of the effectable movable body 4AK001 and the temperature control unit are used to ensure safety and prevent failures. The temperature control by 4AK015 may be stopped. If the target temperature is not reached within a predetermined period after the temperature control by the temperature control unit 4AK015 is started, it is determined that the temperature control unit 4AK015 is out of order, an error notification is executed, and the subsequent temperature is detected. The control may be stopped. Further, the upper limit threshold value and the lower limit threshold value may be changed depending on the control status of the effect movable body 4AK001. For example, during the operation of the effect movable body 4AK001, the temperature tends to rise due to the heat of the motor or the like, so the upper limit threshold value may be raised.

Subsequently, the effect operation of the feature unit 4AK will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 4AK, a look-ahead notice effect (movable body advance notice) for operating the effect movable body 4AK001 can be executed. Further, prior to the execution of the movable body notice, the display mode of the corresponding display (hold display or active display) of the notice target is changed to the display mode of the movable body movement suggestion suggesting that the movable body notice is executed. It is designed to do.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of the effect operation when the movable body notice is executed. FIG. 8-3 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. Further, an active display (also referred to as a specific display) is displayed in the active display area 4AK002 of the image display device 5, indicating that two hold displays are displayed in the hold display area 4AK003.

Here, when a start-up prize is generated and it is decided to execute the movable body notice at the time of the start-up prize based on the start-up prize, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the hold corresponding to the start-up prize is held. The display is displayed by the snowman icon 4AK021, which is a display mode of suggesting the movement of the movable body.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 8-3 (C) and 8-3 (D), the effect movable body 4AK001 (rod-shaped accessory 4AK010) protrudes to the advanced position, and then vibrates. Further, at this time, control for lowering the temperature of the effect movable body 4AK001 is also executed. Such an operation mode is the first mode of the effect movable body 4AK001. The vibration of the movable body 4AK001 for production and the decrease in temperature correspond to the coldness reminiscent of the icon 4AK021 of the snowman, and the icon 4AK021 of the snowman suggests the operation of the movable body 4AK001 for production. can.

FIG. 8-4 shows another example of the effect operation when the movable body notice is executed. FIG. 8-4 (A) shows that the decorative symbols of the lost combination are stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. Further, it is shown that the active display is displayed in the active display area 4AK002 of the image display device 5, and two hold displays are displayed in the hold display area 4AK003.

Here, when the variable display based on the hold memory is started, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the hold display is reduced by one, and the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols are displayed. Variable display is started in areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. If it is decided to execute the movable body notice at the start of the started variable display (when it becomes the active display), the active display is displayed by the sun icon 4AK022, which is the display mode of the movable body movement suggestion. NS.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (C) to 8-4 (E), the effect movable body 4AK001 (rod-shaped accessory 4AK010) protrudes to the post-operation position, and then vibrates. At this time, control for raising the temperature of the effect movable body 4AK001 is also executed. Such an operation mode is the second mode of the effect movable body 4AK001. The rise in temperature of the movable body 4AK001 for production corresponds to the warmth reminiscent of the icon 4AK022 of the sun, and the operation of the movable body 4AK001 for production can be suggested by the icon 4AK022 of the sun.

When the movable body 4AK001 for production operates in the second mode, the degree of protrusion of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is larger than when it operates in the first mode, and it takes time to control the temperature depending on the target temperature. Therefore, it takes time to complete the operation. In this way, the time required to complete the operation differs depending on the operation mode, so that the production is not monotonous and the interest of the production is improved. The time until the operation is completed may be controlled to be the same (or substantially the same) regardless of the operation mode. By doing so, it becomes easy to adjust the execution time of the effect and determine the operation mode, and it becomes easy to prevent competition with other effects.

Next, the pre-reading notice setting process related to the feature unit 4AK will be described. FIG. 8-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process related to the feature unit 4AK. The read-ahead notice setting process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in step S161 of FIG. In the read-ahead notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start prize designation command for designating the occurrence of the start prize has been received from the main board 11 (step 4AKS001). If the start prize designation command has not been received (step 4AKS001; No), the read-ahead notice setting process ends.

If the start prize designation command has been received (step 4AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is already being executed (step 4AKS002). Whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed may be determined from the pre-reading notice executing flag or the like indicating that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. If the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 4AKS002; Yes), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated because a new pre-reading notice effect is not executed in this embodiment. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the movable body motion suggestion and the movable body motion suggestion by the hold display is executed, the movable body motion suggestion by another hold display is executed, and the effect and the notice target are displayed. It can prevent it from becoming difficult to understand. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect and the notification target from being difficult to understand due to duplication of the movement suggestion by the hold notice and the hold display. Even if the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed, a new pre-reading notice effect such as a part of the pre-reading notice effect may be enabled. That is, when the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed, the execution of the new pre-reading notice effect may be restricted.

When the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed (step 4AKS002; No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed (step 4AKS003). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects can be executed, and in step 4AKS003, the type of pre-reading notice effect to be executed is also determined together with whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed.

In step 4AKS003, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the type of the pre-reading advance notice effect to be executed are determined. As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in the present embodiment, the movable body notice, the hold notice, and the stage change notice can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect.

The movable body notice is a look-ahead notice effect in which the effect movable body 4AK001 is operated in a predetermined operation mode. The hold notice is a pre-reading notice effect in which the display mode of the hold display (or active display) is a notice mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.) different from the normal mode (for example, white, etc.). The stage change notice is a pre-reading notice effect in which a plurality of stages (appearing characters, motifs, etc.) in the image display device 5 and the like are provided, and the stage is changed. The jackpot reliability is announced according to the operation mode of the movable body 4AK001 for production, the display mode of the hold display (or active display), and the type of stage, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), depending on whether the pre-reading determination result is a big hit, super reach loss, or other (non-reach loss, etc.), the pre-reading notice effect is determined and executed. The type of pre-reading notice production in the case is different from the determination ratio. The determination result of the look-ahead determination may be specified from the command given at the time of starting winning.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the jackpot reliability is higher when the pre-reading notice effect is executed than when it is not executed, and the movable body notice> hold notice> stage. The jackpot reliability is higher in the order of notice. As a result, the jackpot reliability can be announced depending on whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the type. In addition, when the super reach is lost, it is easy to be determined as the stage notice, and when the stage notice is executed, the super reach is easily executed. This makes it possible to foretell that super reach is likely to occur. The type and execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect are not limited to this, and it is sufficient to be able to announce that the jackpot reliability and the super reach are likely to occur depending on the type and the effect mode of the pre-reading advance notice effect. In addition, the types of pre-reading notice effects other than the movable body notice may be increased or decreased as appropriate.

Subsequently, it is determined in step 4AKS003 whether or not the determination is made other than the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect (step 4AKS004). If it is determined not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step 4AKS004; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

When it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect (step 4AKS004; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the movable body notice (step 4AKS005). When it is decided to execute other than the movable body advance notice (step 4AKS005; No), the setting for executing the determined look-ahead advance notice effect is made (step 4AKS006). In step 4AKS006, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the determined pre-reading advance notice effect is set.

When it is decided to execute the movable body notice (step 4AKS005; Yes), the operation pattern of the effect movable body 4AK001 in the movable body notice is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 4AKS007).

In this embodiment, as the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001, three types of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode are provided as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). The first aspect is an operation mode in which the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 of the effect movable body 4AK001 is operated to the advanced position and then vibrates to reduce the temperature. The second aspect is an operation mode in which the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 of the effect movable body 4AK001 operates to the post-operation position and the control for raising the temperature is executed. The third aspect is an operation mode in which the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 of the effect movable body 4AK001 moves to the post-operation position and then vibrates, and the temperature control is not executed. In addition, the operation mode other than these may be provided.

A plurality of operation timings of the effect movable body 4AK001 in the movable body notice are provided, and the combination of the operation timing and the operation mode is determined for each operation pattern. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the operation patterns A1 and A2 that operate at the time of winning the notice target, the operation patterns B1 and B2 that operate when the hold display of the notice target shifts, and the notice target are active. Operation patterns C1 to C3 that operate when the display is displayed (at the start of the change of the notice target), operation patterns D1 to D3 that operate when the reach of the change of the notice target develops, and when the change of the notice target is determined and produced (display result derivation) The operation patterns E2 and E3 that operate at the time of fanning are provided. The alphabet in each operation pattern corresponds to the operation timing, and the numbers correspond to the operation mode. In this embodiment, the production movable body 4AK001 operates once in one movable body notice, but it operates at a plurality of operation timings from the time of winning to the end of the change of the notice target. An operation pattern may be provided. When operating at a plurality of operation timings, the respective operation modes may be different.

In the process of step 4AKS007, any operation pattern is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), there are operation modes that are easily determined and operation modes that are not determined depending on the operation timing (there are operation modes that are easy to be executed depending on the operation timing). .. By doing this, the production becomes diverse. The determination ratio and the operation pattern shown in FIG. 8-6 (C) are examples, and there may be an operation pattern of a combination of the operation mode and the operation timing not shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). Further, for example, at the operation timing in which the time until the operation is completed is limited, the operation mode in which the operation may not be completed may be excluded. In addition, after the operation mode of the movable body notice is determined, when the operation of the determined operation mode cannot be completed during the fluctuation due to the control to the time saving state, the first mode and the second mode in which the temperature is controlled are performed. The operation of the aspect may be restricted so that the operation of the third aspect may be performed. Further, when it is decided to execute the movable body notice, the time saving control may not be executed until the movable body notice is executed.

The determination ratio of the operation pattern may be different depending on the display result (judgment result of the look-ahead determination). By doing so, the display result can be suggested by the operation pattern. For example, in the first aspect, it is easy to determine when the display result (determination result of pre-reading determination) is lost, but when it becomes a big hit, the ratio of the probability variation big hit may be increased. On the contrary, the second aspect is likely to be determined when the display result (judgment result of the look-ahead determination) is a big hit, but even if the ratio of the probability variation big hit when the big hit is made is lower than that of the first aspect. good. By doing so, even if the jackpot reliability is low, it is possible to have the expectation that the jackpot will be controlled to a probabilistic state when the jackpot is hit, and the interest of the game will be improved. Further, for example, even if the operation timing is the same, the jackpot reliability changes depending on the operation mode by changing the determination ratio of the operation mode depending on the display result, so that the player pays attention to the operation mode. In particular, in the second operation mode and the third operation mode, the advance operation of the effect movable body 4AK001 is the same, but the temperature control is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. Even if the operation mode is the same, the jackpot reliability changes depending on the operation timing by making the determination ratio of the operation timing different depending on the display result, so that the player pays attention to the operation timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation mode and the operation timing are determined by determining the operation pattern, but the operation mode and the operation timing may be determined separately.

Subsequently, the display mode of the corresponding display (moving body motion suggestion) is determined (step 4AKS008). In step 4AKS008, the display mode of the corresponding display is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-6 (D) according to the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-6 (D), in this embodiment, as the display mode of the corresponding display of the movable body movement suggestion, the first display mode (snowman icon) and the second display mode (sun icon) are used. It is provided. The display mode of the corresponding display of the movable body motion suggestion is a display mode of the corresponding display that changes when the movable body notice is executed, and is different from the notice mode in the hold notice.

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (D), in the present embodiment, when the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is the first mode, the first display is as the display mode of the corresponding display (movable body movement suggestion). It is easy to determine the mode, and when the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is the second mode, it is easy to determine the second display mode as the display mode of the corresponding display (movable body motion suggestion). When the movable body notice is executed, the corresponding display of the notice target is changed to the display mode of the movable body movement suggestion determined here before the movable body notice is executed (for example, at the start of operation or a few seconds before). It is designed to do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 depending on the display mode in which the corresponding display is changed. In addition, since the corresponding display of the notice target is changed, the change of the notice target can be easily understood. Even when the effectable movable body 4AK001 operates during the variable display (active display) of the notice target, the hold display of the notice target may be displayed in the display mode of the movable body movement suggestion from the time of winning. ..

Further, when the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is the first mode in which the control for lowering the temperature is executed, the first display mode (snowman icon) is displayed as the corresponding display (movable body operation suggestion). When the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is the second mode executed by the control of raising the temperature, the display mode of the corresponding display (movable body movement suggestion) is the second display mode (of the sun). It is easier to decide on the icon). In this way, by making it easy to change the corresponding display to an icon corresponding to the temperature control of the moving body 4AK001 for production, it becomes easier to understand the movement suggestion of the moving body.

It should be noted that the method of associating the effect mode of suggesting the movement of the movable body with the operation mode of the movable body 4AK001 for production is indirectly suggested by displaying an icon corresponding to temperature and vibration as in this embodiment. The operation of the movable body 4AK001 for production is directly displayed, the display is linked by performing the same display operation in the same period as the operation of the movable body 4AK001 for production, and the sound and lamp are lit. Alternatively, a combination thereof may suggest the operation of the effect movable body 4AK001.

The determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-6 (D) is an example, and it suffices if the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 can be suggested by the display mode of the corresponding display. Only one of the control of making it easier to perform or making it easier to determine the second display mode in the case of the second aspect may be executed. Further, the type of display mode of the corresponding display (suggestion of movement of the movable body) is an example, and there may be three or more types. For example, a display mode of the corresponding display corresponding to the third mode may be provided. Further, the display mode of the corresponding display may be uniquely determined according to the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001.

In addition, as the display mode of the corresponding display of the movable body movement suggestion, the third display mode (the icon of the snowman melts into the icon of the sun) that changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the second display mode. A fourth display mode (the sun icon becomes cloudy and becomes a snow icon) or the like that changes from the first display mode to the first display mode may be provided. In this case, it suffices to suggest a movable body notice to be executed according to the final display mode. In addition, there may be a display mode intermediate between the first display mode and the second display mode. For example, a first intermediate display mode (for example, a melting snowman icon) indicating that the first display mode is likely to change to the second display mode, or a change from the second display mode to the first display mode. A second intermediate display mode (for example, a cloudy sun icon, etc.) may be provided. When the movable body motion suggestion is started, the first intermediate display mode is more likely to change to the second display mode than in the first display mode, and the movable body motion suggestion is started. In the case of the second intermediate display mode, the first display mode may be changed more easily than in the case of the second display mode. Further, in the final display mode, the movable body notice of the first mode is easily executed in the order of the first display mode> the first intermediate display mode> the second intermediate display mode> the second display mode, and the second display mode>. It suffices that the movable body notice of the first aspect can be easily executed in the order of the second intermediate display mode> the first intermediate display mode> the first display mode.

In this embodiment, when the movable body notice is executed, the display mode of the corresponding display (movable body movement suggestion) is determined, but it corresponds regardless of whether or not the movable body notice is executed. The display mode of the display (suggestion of motion of the movable body) may be determined. By doing so, when the corresponding display of the movable body movement suggestion is displayed but the movable body notice is not executed, or when the normal corresponding display is displayed but the movable body notice is executed. There will be more and more production. In this case, for example, each effect mode may be determined according to the pre-reading determination result. By associating the determination rate of the motion pattern of the movable body notice based on the pre-reading determination result with the determination rate of the display mode of the corresponding display, the motion pattern of the movable body notice can be suggested by the display mode of the corresponding display.

After determining the display mode of the corresponding display (suggesting the movement of the movable body), the determination results in steps 4AKS007 and AKS008 are saved (step 4AKS009). By referring to the determination result saved here in the variable display during effect processing in step S172, the effect operation of the movable body notice and the movable body motion suggestion is realized.

After step 4AKS006 or step 4AKS009, control is executed to display the hold display (active display when the number of holds is 0) corresponding to the current start prize on the image display device 5 (step 4AKS010), and the read-ahead notice setting process is completed. do.

(Modification example of feature part 4AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 4AK, it is suggested that the effect movable body 4AK001 operates (movable body notice is executed) by changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display (specific display). Although the movable body motion suggestion is executed, the movable body motion suggestion may be executed by changing the background image in the image display device 5. For example, in this case, in step 4AKS008 of FIG. 8-5, the background image of the movable body motion suggestion may be determined. In this case, the background image is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, according to the operation mode of the movable body notice. As shown in FIG. 8-7, in this modified example, the first background (change from cloudy background to snow background), the second background (change from cloudy background to sunny background), and the second background image suggesting the movement of the movable body are used. There are 3 backgrounds (no change from the cloudy background). The background image in the normal time (when the notice and the movement suggestion of the movable body are not executed) is used as the cloudy background, and the background image changes from the background in the normal time to the background image of the movement suggestion of the movable body in the first background and the second background. In the third background, there may be no background change. In addition, the display mode of the corresponding display of the movable body movement suggestion may be four or more types or two types.

As shown in FIG. 8-7, in the present modification, when the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is the first aspect, it is easy to determine the first background as the background image, and the operation of the effect movable body 4AK001 is performed. When the aspect is the second aspect, it is easy to be determined as the second background as the background image, and when the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is the third aspect, it is easily determined as the third background as the background image. It has become. It is the same as the above-described embodiment that the background image of the movable body motion suggestion corresponding to the motion mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is easily determined.

When the movable body notice is executed, the background image in the image display device 5 is changed to the background image determined here before the movable body notice is executed (for example, at the start of operation or a few seconds before). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 by the changed background image. It should be noted that the movable body motion suggestion by the background image may be executed only when the movable body notice is executed in the variable display of the notice target. Then, when the movable body notice is executed before the variable display of the notice target is executed, the movable body movement suggestion by the hold display may be executed. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand the notice target of the movable body notice. Further, when the variable display of the advance notice target is in the hold display, the background image may be changed at the timing when the hold display shifts.

As the movable body motion suggestion, both the movable body motion suggestion by the background image and the movable body motion suggestion by the corresponding display may be executed. In this case, after executing the movable body motion suggestion by the background image, the movable body motion suggestion in which the display mode of the corresponding display changes may be executed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the corresponding display changes as the background image changes. In this case, the combination of the background image and the display mode of the corresponding display may suggest which movable body advance notice is executed. Further, the movable body motion suggestion in which the background image changes may be executed after the movable body motion suggestion by the corresponding display is executed. In this case, the display mode of the corresponding display may be changed according to the changed background image. For example, if the background image changes to a sunny background image after the mover motion suggestion to display the snowman icon is executed, the snowman icon melts and changes to the sun icon, or makes it more variable. You may.

The determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-7 is an example, and may be any determination ratio that can suggest the operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 from the background image.

In the above embodiment, after deciding whether or not to execute the movable body advance notice, the effect mode of the movable body motion suggestion is determined, but the method of determining the movable body motion suggestion is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode of the movable body notice and the movable body motion suggestion may be determined by providing a plurality of effect patterns in which the movable body notice and the movable body motion suggestion are associated with each other and determining the effect pattern. Such an effect pattern may be determined by a variation pattern.

The effectable movable body 4AK001 of the above embodiment was capable of performing a projecting motion and an advancing motion, and was capable of a vibration motion and a temperature change. The operation mode of the effect movable body 4AK001 is not limited to this, and other operations may be possible. For example, the rotation operation, the lighting of the lamp, the color change, and the like may be made executable. In addition, the installation position, shape, operation mode, and type of operation mode of the movable body for production may be arbitrary, and any movement can be suggested by the display mode and background image of the corresponding display. That is, it suffices that the movable body for effect can perform an operation corresponding to the display mode of the corresponding display and the background image. The movable body for production may be one that does not vibrate or change in temperature.

(Explanation of means related to feature 4AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 4AK is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
An effect movable body (for example, an effect movable body 4AK001L) that can be changed into a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second aspect (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R) and
Hold storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can store information related to variable display as hold storage, and
A hold display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a hold display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun) corresponding to the hold storage. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120) that displays a hold display.
The movable body for production is
When the hold display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
When the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
The case where the hold display is displayed in the second display mode is more likely to change to the second mode than the case where the hold display is displayed in the first display mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 (FIG. 8-6). D)).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) Other gaming machines related to the feature section 4AK are
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
An effect movable body (for example, an effect movable body 4AK001L) that can be changed into a plurality of types of modes including the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second aspect (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R) and
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for displaying an active display on an image display device 5) is provided.
The specific display means can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun).
The movable body for production is
When the specific display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
When the specific display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode.
The case where the specific display is displayed in the second display mode is more likely to change to the second mode than the case where the specific display is displayed in the first display mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 (FIG. 8-6). D)).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The movable body for effect is more likely to display the hold display (specific display) in the first display mode than to display the hold display (specific display) in the second display mode. It may be easy to change to the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The hold display means (specific display means) is capable of displaying the hold display (specific display) so that the operation of the hold display (specific display) corresponds to the operation of the effect movable body. May be good.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
You may do so.
The movable body for production is
It is provided so that players can contact it.
The temperature can be changed to a plurality of stages, and the temperature may be changed to a higher temperature in the second aspect than in the first aspect (for example, 8-6 (B)).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The period required for the change may be different depending on whether the movable body for production changes to the first aspect or changes to the second aspect.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
An operation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for controlling the operation of the effect control movable body is provided.
In the motion control means, the operation of the effect movable body is performed during the period from when the operation of the effect movable body is suggested by the hold display (specific display) until the operation of the effect movable body is executed. Operations other than the above may be restricted (for example, if the pre-reading notice is already being executed in step 4AKS002 and the determination is made later, the new pre-reading notice or the motion suggestion of the movable body is not executed).
According to such a configuration, the progress of the production can be smoothly performed.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step 120AKSA12), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
Setting control means that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01, 120AKSA02). When,
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member that operates by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member that operates by the operation motor AK014, the effect movable body 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.)
At least, a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and a control for an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes command processing when the power of AKS012 is turned on.
The movable control means may control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) when the change permission state is set.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed when the change permission state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting change process in step 120AKSA12), and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
Setting control means that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01, 120AKSA02). When,
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member that operates by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member that operates by the operation motor AK014, the effect movable body 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.)
At least, it is provided with a movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a command process at power-on in step AKS012) capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position.
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
In the change permission state, the control to execute the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature unit 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and the players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, the setting key 112IW051 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described later, and the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature unit 112IW, the form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 112IW201, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, a substrate including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the pachinko / pachislot machine clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machines 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the set value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 112IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the loss shown in FIG. 9-6. A variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 increasing the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise.

(Display result judgment table)
9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change). do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change). do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, for example, when the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (the number of times the probability change ends) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

The feature unit 112IW provides a total of three set values of 1 to 3 as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 9-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5 (B). In the feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the start of the jackpot game state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect effect to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the post-opening process of the jackpot in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 12 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

The feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during the jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is performed during the fanfare period, interval period, and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot types A <B <C is used. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 112IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or when the special figure game is entered into the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and the probability variation control is different for each jackpot type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) between the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, and the fanfare period and interval. The average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, but for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each jackpot type, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 112IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases, the jackpot type C as the jackpot type becomes easier to be determined, etc.). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the jackpot game differs depending on the jackpot type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the gaming ball is specially variable during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability is higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, but during the jackpot game. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch) is passed through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probability change state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result should be "big hit" and the fluctuation display result may be "missing". A loss fluctuation pattern determination table to be used when the determination is made in advance is prepared in advance.

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and the other period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution rate of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and further, a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss when other than non-reach loss, depending on the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". The ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 112IW, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. This is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only normal reach loss has different execution ratios depending on the set value.

The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image in the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B) is used. Then, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the effect symbol in a variable manner. The dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine the crab.

As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the shaking display of the effect symbol and the time of the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to perform the effect, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final effect symbol (final) is determined according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is displayed as a stop may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the fluctuation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set higher.

The feature unit 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time, which is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. Then, this variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the variation time for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may be different depending on the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as a continuous ratio, a winning combination ratio, and a base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display unit of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments drawing a "8" character and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

The display contents are displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third-digit display unit and the fourth-digit display unit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. Is displayed with "A7." On the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the one digit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the eye display and the second digit display. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

Further, the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, and the set values set at that time. It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 9-8 to 9-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial settings are made, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a factory-factory value (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible set value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory default settings are used (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (a state in which the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is on, the RAM clear process for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 102 is executed after the process related to the setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120AKSA03.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (when the door is closed) (N in step 112IWS011) or when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), from the clear switch. When the output signal of is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process proceeds to the loop process without shifting to the step 120AKSA01. Before entering the loop process, the control of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (the process of step 112IWS010) may be executed.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S013 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the factory default settings are maintained (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. On condition that, the set value after step 120 AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, the process for confirming the setting (setting confirmation process) or the process for changing the setting (setting change) depends on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, the on / off of the clear switch). Process) is executed. Note that the error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change command or the setting confirmation command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a predetermined image or displays a predetermined image. A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a factory default value (for example, “0” or the like) (step 120AKSA06). If it is the factory default setting value (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the setting value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). In step 120 AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated to "1".

In step 120 AKSA07, when the set value is a factory default value, the set value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other set values may be set as the initial value. Also, when there is a RAM error error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed), the set value is set to the initial value "1". You may try to do it. In this case, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed (when step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM error flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM error flag is set. May be determined whether or not is on.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the process of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08). ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 112AKSA12). The set value is updated every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the set value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the set value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the set value is "3", it is updated to "1". Just update. A specific setting value may be specified by operating the setting changeover switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process related to the setting change is not executed. In this case, or when the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on (step 120AKSA11; No), after updating the process of step 112AKSA12, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is turned off. (Step 120 AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains ON (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. When the set value is updated in step 112AKS012, the process of step 120AKSA08 is executed again, so that the updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

When the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120SA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14; Yes), the setting changing flag is reset (step 120AKSA15), and a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16). ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and the set value command indicating the set value is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). The setting value command may be sent only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120 AKSA19). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120 AKSA19; Yes), the RAM clear process is executed (step 120 AKSA 20). In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value among the storage areas of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the ratio and the combination ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S9 (step 112 IWS033).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. conduct. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to the process of step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

In step 120AKSA08, the set value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed by using the image display device 5.

Further, during the execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). May be good. By notifying the player using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is preferable. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change processing is executed again and the updated setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) unless the setting change is completed. , You may make an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is performed at the end of the setting change process. If the flag is turned off and the setting change flag is on when executing a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process), an error occurs. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally in the middle, the clerk at the amusement park may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, it is possible to guarantee the reliable completion of the setting change by setting an error if the setting change is not completed.

Further, in step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, the image display device 5 is displayed with information indicating that an error occurs, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, if all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, or if all the lights are turned on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all the blinking may occur).

FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA013, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA013, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (20 etc. in step 120AKSA05) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step) if the clear switch is off. 112IWS024) is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, branching is performed according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) while sharing some of the processing. So, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process has been executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as an individual process.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is being opened during a big hit game or the like at the timing when the power is turned off, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 tells the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the set values set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory about the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F), the CPU 103 displays "EE" on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored. It is possible to make it.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Operation of the effect control board 12 in a gaming machine whose settings can be changed)
FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing another example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization process (step AKS011) as in the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, the power-on command process (step). AKS012) is executed. After executing the command processing at power-on, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step AKS017) are executed in order.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 as the command process at power-on. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 as a reception command with the start of power supply, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9100H that is the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If it is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and steps AKS021 to AKS024 are repeatedly executed and waited until the reception command is acquired. If the reception command cannot be acquired and a predetermined error determination time has elapsed, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

If it is determined in step AKS023 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start processing, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state and the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025, control is performed to start the setting change notification (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting change notification, and outputs the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is completed. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not completed (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS027 to end the setting change (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen in the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification is completed in this way, the processing at the end of the game stop state is executed (step AKS029). In the process at the end of the game stop state, a setting may be made to enable command reception from the main board 11, which has been invalidated. As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes to the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses, based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even if it is determined in step AKS021 that the reception command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification may be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power.

If it is determined in step AKS024 that the reception command is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state and the game is not in the stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS031, control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs the setting confirmation notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is completed. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is completed (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control may be performed to execute the power failure recovery notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the power failure recovery notification, and outputs the power failure recovery notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected due to the start of power supply by turning on the power. good.

(Explanation of feature 72AK)
The effect control board 12 of the feature portion 72AK includes operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member serving as a movable accessory (movable effect device), and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. It is connected. The operating motors AK011 to AK014 may be those using a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid, or the like. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured by using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance type sensor.

FIG. 10-3 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 includes a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). An operation effect of ascending diagonally upward to the right from the evacuation position, stopping at an advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returning to the evacuation position is performed. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. The first to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at the origin position when they are united in the closed state. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is in the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced positions. The slide mechanism of the first movable member has the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the origin position when the first movable member is in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right side position.

The second movable member stops with the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at an advance position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that makes the rotation mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position. The operating motor AK012 provides a driving force that makes the first to third split pieces of the first movable member movable between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that makes the slide mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the left side position or the right side position of the effect display device 5. The operating motor AK014 provides a driving force that makes the second movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position.

The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial motion is an initial motion that performs the same motion as the normal effect motion during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal production operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which some operations in the normal effect operation are omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by the solid line arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. It is moved to an overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state to the open state at the origin position by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. After that, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the movable position in the left direction. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advance position to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. After that, as shown by the broken arrow arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retract position) to the advance position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retract position).

When the short initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, a part of the long initial operation may be omitted. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, the control for executing the operations indicated by the dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. Further, in the long initial operation, the operation of the first to third split pieces and the second movable member of the first movable member is performed so that the movement amount is larger than the operation indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the amount of movement is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the broken line arrow 72AKM03 is used as an operation to move the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state which is the origin position. The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the drive of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. Drive the motor AK021. Further, the second movable member may be moved as indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

FIG. 10-4 shows a control pattern used for driving a movable member by the operating motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The effect A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a first effect executed with the progress of a game, such as a reach effect. The effect B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a second effect different from the first effect executed as the game progresses, such as a notice effect. .. As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature portion 72AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 72AKS003 (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS005) and the setting is changed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS006).

After the control in step 72AKS006 is performed, unlike the above embodiment, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control to execute the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change in the same manner as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS008). If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed (step 72AKS008; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed after the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permission state. It is possible to prevent control. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 72AKS014). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control to execute the initialization notification may be performed before the control to execute the short initial operation is performed by step 72AKS012. ..

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 72AKS004 (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS015) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 72AKS018; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

After the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in the setting confirmation state, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation. Can be prevented from controlling to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature portion 72AK)
FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed in a modified example of the feature portion 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), and the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS031), then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS032), and then the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to control execution of the initialization notification. When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, by executing the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation after the short initial operation which is the return operation. .. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, and then the return operation is performed. Following the initial operation, it is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation which is the initial operation. In this way, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), and the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS033), and then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing is terminated. When the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are restored to the stored contents at the time of the power failure when the power supply is started by turning on the power. .. When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to control the execution of the long initial operation which is the initial operation after the short initial operation which is the return operation. can. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the state ends, it is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, following the short initial operation, which is the return operation. In this way, when the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the initialization notification is not performed. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the power failure recovery notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the power failure recovery notification is not performed. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be executed. It suffices as long as it can be operated according to a predetermined operation mode in the production accompanying the progress of the game. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

As described above, in the power-on command process of the feature unit 72AK, in step 72AKS007, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work of changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work of changing the set value is performed. It is possible to prevent the trouble from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting is in the setting confirmation state. In this way, when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, is not executed so that the setting value change work is not hindered. It is possible to prevent the value change work from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS011 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member in the case of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the feature unit 72AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform the return operation. Control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. When the initialization notification is executed and the initialization notification is executed, the control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, in step AKS017, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. In this way, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation. After that, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS021 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, control is performed to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting confirmation state is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is reached. This makes it possible to easily confirm the set value by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being executed in the setting confirmation state in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered. To do so. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

(Explanation of means related to feature 72AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 72AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and a control for an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes command processing when the power of AKS012 is turned on.
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation when the change permission state is set (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed when the change permission state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature portion 72AK,
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013).
In the change permission state, the control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the change permission state and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature portion 72AK,
The movable control means controls to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation by the movable member and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 related to the feature portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 72AKS014) that executes initialization notification. Etc.)
The movable control means
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying the execution of step 72AKS014).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can control the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The movable control means
In the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017).
After the setting confirmation state is completed, control for executing the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, the set value can be easily confirmed by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of feature 73AK)
FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 73AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the feature unit 73AK as well, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as that of the feature unit 72AK of this embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 73AKS003 (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control to start the notification (step 73AKS006).

After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change (step 73AKS007; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed. ..

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001 (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009, the control to execute the short initial operation is controlled. (Step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 73AKS010 is completed. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation which is the initial operation. Can be controlled to execute. Further, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, it is possible to control to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation after the setting change state is completed. Alternatively, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of power supply, after the setting change state is completed, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of the operation.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 73AKS012). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, control for executing the short initial operation may be performed, then control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 73AKS004 (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS013) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 73AKS016; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is controlled to end (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the command processing at power-on is terminated. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in effect. Can be prevented from controlling to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

When it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK.

FIG. 10-8 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification for the feature unit 73AK. On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "setting confirmation in progress" is displayed, and the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the set value may be cumulatively stored on the effect control board 12 side by storing the set value information together with the RTC (real-time clock) information in the backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. good. Alternatively, the history of the set value can be obtained by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a predetermined area in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, when the set value history is stored in the backup area together with the RTC information in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, power is supplied on the effect control board 12 side. It may be possible to identify it with the start of.

When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of the set value can be grasped. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be moved when the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value is set. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation, which is a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation which is the return operation is executed, so that the setting confirmation notification screen is executed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff of the amusement park or the like. On the other hand, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, so that the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is, the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation is not performed after the short initial operation which is the return operation. In this way, when the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the power supply is started, the short initial operation which is the return operation is executed while the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed in this setting confirmation state. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the game hall staff can easily grasp the history of the set values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the history of set values from becoming difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

Even when the setting is controlled to the changed state, the history of the set value may be displayable. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. In this way, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the power supply starts, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed so that the set value is executed. The history of the power may be easily grasped.

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control is performed in step 73AKS010 to execute the short initial operation. .. On the other hand, when the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 73AKS003, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that the change work of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to control the execution of the short initial operation as the return operation. In this way, since the control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, it is movable when it is prevented that the setting value change work is hindered. The operation of properly returning the member to the origin position becomes possible.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the short initial operation is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. When the initialization notification is executed and the initialization notification is executed, the control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the reception command is the setting confirmation start command, the short initial operation is controlled in step 73AKS015. In this way, when the display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the set value, is being executed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped when it is prevented that the operation of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, when the command 9100H, which is the setting change start command, is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H, which is a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11, is different from the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the setting value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, a command as information different from the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the effect when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 73AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, it is provided with a movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a command process at power-on in step AKS012) capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position.
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 73AK,
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, the movable member can be operated appropriately, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 73AKS012) that executes initialization notification. Etc.)
The movable control means
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK,
A setting display means (for example, an effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming a setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The setting display means can display a history of set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is executed, and does not control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and the work of changing the setting value is hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature unit 73AK,
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the command analysis process of AKS015) for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information from the game control means is provided.
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits information different from the case where the change permission state is not controlled (for example, command 9100H which is a setting change start command). ,
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by the effect control means and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Relationship between feature parts 4AK, 72AK, 73AK)
The movable member in the feature portions 72AK and 73AK may be the effect movable body 4AK001 (4AK001L, 4AK001R) of the feature portion 4AK. All or part of the inventions relating to the feature portions 72AK and 73AK may be applied to the return operation (short initial operation) and the initial operation (long initial operation) of the effect movable body 4AK001. Further, a part or all of the invention relating to the feature portion 4AK may be applied to the feature portions 72AK and 73AK.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) in the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)). For example, an effect movable body (for example, effect movable body 4AK001L, 4AK001R) that can be changed into a plurality of types including FIG. 8-4 (E), and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage. A hold display means (for example, a RAM 102) capable of displaying a hold display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun) corresponding to the hold storage. For example, the effect control CPU 120) that displays the hold display on the image display device 5, and the effect movable body is the first mode or the first mode when the hold display is displayed in the first display mode. When the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, the hold display can be changed to the first mode or the second mode, and the hold display is displayed in the first display mode. In the case where the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, the game is more likely to change to the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)), and the game can proceed further. An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on a control means (for example, CPU 103) and information from the game control means (for example, an effect control command), and an advantage for the player. A setting means (for example, CPU103) that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 6) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a setting change operation is executed). The effect control means is provided with a setting change means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change value change process) that can be controlled to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. It is possible to cause a predetermined effect means (for example, the image display device 5) to execute an operation based on the information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) for designating the execution of the above-mentioned setting. When controlled to the change state, the operation based on the information specifying that the variable display is to be executed is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state. Even if a fluctuation pattern specification command is received, the fluctuation pattern specification command is discarded, so control based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern specification command is not executed.) A technical machine can be mentioned.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

Further, the movable body effect and the set value may be associated with each other. For example, the execution ratio of the movable body effect may be different between the case where the set value is 1 and the case where the set value is 6. When the set value is 6, the player can infer the set value from the execution ratio of the movable body effect by increasing the execution ratio of the movable body effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, the display mode of the hold display and the set value may be associated with each other. For example, the ratio of displaying either the first display mode or the second display mode may be different between the case where the set value is 1 and the case where the set value is 6. By doing so, the player can infer the set value from the execution ratio of the display mode of the hold display, and the interest is improved.

Further, the set value may be suggested depending on the operation mode of the movable body for production. For example, the operation mode in the process of changing the effect movable body to the first aspect or the second aspect is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and each operation mode of the effect movable body is selected according to the set value. By making the selection ratios different, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the easier it is to perform the movable body effect by a specific type of motion mode. By doing so, the movement modes of the movable body for production are rich in variety, and the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value according to the appearance ratio of each movement mode of the movable body for production. Can be improved.
Further, when the movable body for effect changes to the first aspect or the second aspect, the set value suggestion effect may be performed by the image display device. For example, when the effect movable body changes to the first mode or the second aspect, a character is displayed on the image display device, and each time the effect movable body changes to the first aspect or the second aspect, a plurality of types of the character are displayed. By selecting from among the characters by lottery, etc., and by making the selection ratio of each character different depending on the set value, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the more the effect by a specific type of character is produced. It may be easier to do. By doing so, if the effect of changing the movable body for effect is executed, the set value suggestion effect will be performed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) in the first aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second aspect (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)). For example, an effect movable body (for example, an effect movable body 4AK001L, 4AK001R) that can be changed into a plurality of types including FIG. 8-4 (E), and a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display. (For example, an effect control CPU 120 that displays an active display on the image display device 5), and the specific display means includes a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun). The specific display can be displayed in the display mode of, and the movable body for effect can be changed to the first mode or the second mode when the specific display is displayed in the first display mode. When the specific display is displayed in the second display mode, the specific display can be changed to the first mode or the second mode, and the second display mode is higher than the case where the specific display is displayed in the first display mode. When the specific display is displayed in the display mode, it is easier to change to the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)), and further, with a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of advancing the game. ,
Based on the information from the game control means (for example, the effect control command), the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the effect and the set value of a plurality of stages (for example) having different advantages for the player. , Setting value 1 to 6), and the setting value based on the setting means (for example, CPU103) that can be set to any of the setting values and the establishment of a specific condition (for example, the setting confirmation operation is executed). Information (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state that can be confirmed is provided, and the effect control means specifies that variable display is to be executed (information that specifies that variable display is executed). For example, it is possible to cause a predetermined effect means (for example, the image display device 5 and the game effect lamp 9) to execute an operation based on the variation pattern designation command), and the predetermined effect means controls the setting confirmation state. When this is done, the operation based on the information that specifies that the variable display is to be executed is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state. , Even if the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, the fluctuation pattern designation command is discarded, so that the control based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command is not executed.)
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

Further, as a game machine capable of improving the interest and executing suitable control, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by executing variable display. 1), the effect control means (for example, CPU103) capable of advancing the game, and the effect control means (for example, effect control means) capable of controlling the effect based on the information (for example, the effect control command) from the game control means. The effect control CPU 120), a setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player, and predetermined conditions. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value change processing) that can control the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed based on the establishment of (for example, the setting change operation is executed). The effect control means can cause a predetermined effect means (for example, an image display device 5) to execute an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) that specifies that variable display is to be executed. The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on the information specifying that the variable display is to be executed when the setting change state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3). The effect control CPU 120 does not execute control based on the reception of the variation pattern specification command because it discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled to the setting change state.) The machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

(Explanation of Feature 207SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the game board. The right side of the image display device 5 in No. 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball launched relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the ball striking handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the ball striking handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-7, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 207SG of the other embodiment is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state of being in a state of being. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment is a state in which the clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation). State).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 207SG201 so that the board case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the board case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 207SG003 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 207SG201, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the lower left position of the game area) in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment is set. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing the variable display of the first special figure, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing the variable display of the second special figure, and the first hold capable of displaying the first reserved storage number. Display 207SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 207SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 207SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number , Round display 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, a game state in which a game ball such as a high base state (time saving state) or a big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. The game information display unit 207SG200 is provided, in which the right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up in the above, the probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and the time reduction lamp 207SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, if the variation display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

Regarding the case where the variation display result is a big hit in the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type to display the variation display result. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variation display result is a big hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the variation with two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device. At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the 207SG004A and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 207SG025A and second hold display 207SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (in another embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the feature section 207SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It is designed to be used. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-6, for example, when one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 due to the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Which segment of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment includes the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during the variation display or the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332, which can detect the presence of the object, is connected to the origin detection sensor 207SG332.

FIG. 11-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG in another embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the determination result (pre-determination result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ), And different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a set value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In addition, in other embodiments, the embodiment in which each random number value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-9 is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and each of these is not limited to this. The range of the random number values MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-10 shows variation patterns in other embodiments. In another embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In other embodiments, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the other inventions are not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... May be provided with a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-10, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the super reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α, and super reach It is set shorter than β. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in other embodiments, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is executed. The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the other embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the jackpot expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern And in the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of big hit.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into the types of fluctuation patterns, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Is not determined first, and then the variation patterns to be executed are determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the other invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided. The type of the fluctuation pattern may be determined first from the random values for determining the type of the variation pattern, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-10, a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern is illustrated, but other inventions have been made. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to be a fluctuation pattern that causes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -11 (C), the display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), and the display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 11-12 (B). Set value 5), display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 11-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), FIG. 11-13 ( In addition to the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal map display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but other inventions are limited to this. Instead, individual display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of the "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, Compared to 1/240 when the set value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and the game is in the big hit game state. The probability of being determined to be controlled increases (in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 3). 1/160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

Further, in each display result judgment table, the judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C), regardless of the gaming state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is set to 1/200. It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. However, the other invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit gaming state may be different depending on the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value is shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and 11-12. When any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. 11-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C) is the probability (ratio) of a big hit and a small hit. Indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, the CPU 103 has the display shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C). The result judgment table is used to judge whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are separately provided for each set value, and the variable display result is used as a big hit. It may be determined individually whether or not it is a small hit and whether or not it is a small hit.

In another embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in the gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

11-13 (A) and 11-13 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 11-13 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, in FIG. 11-13 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 207SG of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the state shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end of, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment), or the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the special figure game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited thereto. May be provided in two or less types, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is set to big hit B. Illustrating a form that is not determined, that is, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type may be determined to be jackpot B. good.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set setting value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become like.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. May be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). However, the other invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game playability itself does not change. The invention is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 11-15 (A) and 11-15 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and is lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in other embodiments, when these determination values are such that the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is likely to be determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be a “big hit B” or a “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the expectation of the person.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is set to any of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in this embodiment, the other inventions are not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. , The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (D), in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

In this way, when the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are completely set between the set values as the variation pattern for loss. Although the same embodiment is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are set. The values may differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is determined regardless of the set value set. It may be the same, or only the determination ratio of any of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss regardless of the set value set. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios of are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the other inventions are not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super The determination rate of only one of the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss regardless of the set value set. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios of are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the other inventions are not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated. However, depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The fluctuation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 11-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) to 11-16 (C), a variation pattern determination table for loss that differs depending on the total number of reserved storages is used. Although the form of determining the fluctuation pattern is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed) Even if the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss that differs according to the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed). good.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the variation of the super reach loss does not matter which of the values 1 to 6 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the mode in which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated. , Other inventions are not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). NS. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number of stored data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-17 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

It should be noted that the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment is executed by using the area not to be tested in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is.

As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (B) and 11-17 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of another embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear process for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa010 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed) ( 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGsa023), and as shown in FIG. 11-26 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGsa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is called and started, only a part of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 is blinked. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGsa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. 11-26. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 207SGsa032-207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 207SG029, No. Since the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is changed in 207SGSa021. The embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the middle flag is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and other inventions are not limited to this. In the RAM clear processing, it was determined that the RAM clear flag was set in 207SGSa014, not after the clear switch was determined to be ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag was cleared in 207SGSa021. It may be executed in the case (207SGSa014; Y).

FIG. 11-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of 207SGSa042 and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) store game information including special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" at an address other than the set value.

The feature unit 207SG in the other embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the other invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is started by a cold start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 207SG in another embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the other invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used for game control. By storing in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102 is omitted. However, the processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing a set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa052, FIG. 11-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode that is not any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 11-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (reset the set value to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any of 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the execution of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 207SGsa062 to 207SGsa065. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGsa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the provisional set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. When the value of the set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa102, FIG. 11-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 11-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power supply disconnection detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa107; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the lock switch 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B All segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGsa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display 207SG131 are lit, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the holding display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., can see the pachinko game machine 1 changing the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is set as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. An example of lighting only one LED is illustrated, but the other invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is the jackpot A shown in FIG. 11-6. As long as it does not correspond to any of the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment responds to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. As an embodiment, a mode in which the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are set. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch is opened in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By turning on the 207SG051 and the clear switch, the set value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (A) to 11-25 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 11-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the other embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (electrically cut off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is pressed with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By turning it ON (clear switch is OFF), the set value confirmation process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (A), 11-25 (B), and 11-25 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is first turned off by turning off the power. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 11-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the other embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 11-24 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the CPU 103 executes the same power failure detection process (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. After that, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer goes out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). (Information including the number of super reach times, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 are notified. The RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification is executed) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image in the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk at the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 after displaying the notification image 207SG005M1) that notifies the fact, emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The setting value-related notification processing for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412).

In the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (B) and 11-36 (C), the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change and a notification during setting value confirmation. In, the notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the set value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the set value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. In the activated state, the game machine frame 207SG003 is generally open, and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value uses the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being visually recognized. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of a game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot determine from the display of the image display device 5 whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during setting value change and the notification during confirmation of set value, the pachinko game machine is sent to the clerk of the game hall who changes or confirms the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the first movable body (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. Is to be executed (see FIG. 11-35).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34. 11-33 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 11-34 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, and FIG. 11-34 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control at the time of non-detection.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect position (second position), and are provided from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during the variable display or the like.

The effect control CPU 120 is movable when the detected portion of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. When the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the game island, or when the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the motor is removed. The movable body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the game machine due to a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the movable body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to the origin or cannot operate due to adjustment, failure, or catching. If it is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. 11-22), the origin is returned. Execute non-detection operation control for. When the operation control at the time of non-detection is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and are the control speeds set for operating the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG 322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and the other moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section. Movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 when the mode is different between the moving section and other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the moving section rises and falls even in the same moving section. The operating speed when the is actually operated may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322's actual operating speeds are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and size of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are determined. When there are differences in the operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the set actual operation check process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the control speed set in the above. Specifically, control is performed so that after accelerating from the origin position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the effect position, and after accelerating from the effect position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change in the order of high speed → low speed. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed are higher than the minimum speed. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are controlled so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as operating.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG3211 is controlled so as to be the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when the device is stopped at the effect position. After the 207SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection time operation control, it is moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, in the effect control CPU 120, the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (other speeds). In the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, it is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Controls the operation of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When operated at the control speed when accelerating, that is, at high speed, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion, or they can move from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 11-29, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value has been completed is set (207SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412 and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the processing of 207SGS416.

In the 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change is completed. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (207SGS420).

In the 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) is the same process as the 207SGS413. The second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as the 207SGS414, is executed, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), the 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and when the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started. To execute. As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When it is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second are performed again. The movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence state, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization process is not yet completed. In that case, that is, when the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed and the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization during execution are completed. Only the conversion process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

If the 207SGS411 does not receive the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error designation command is received (207SGS425). .. When the error specification command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error specification command is executed, and when the error specification command is not received (207SGS425; N), the error notification process is executed. , 207 SGS 403.

As the error notification in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (D), the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Just do it.

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player). While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since receiving the input of information from the RAM 122, the information for production (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) Etc.) and the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated and stored).

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. ing.

Then, in the 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. Start displaying the initial symbol according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 207SG in the other embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "4" from the left as initial symbols. A form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started by a combination of "5" and "6" is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is illustrated. ) Is set, the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is higher than when (for example, "1") is set, and the decorative symbol is set to "4", "5", "6" as the initial symbol. It may be displayed in combination. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG in the other embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "4" from the left as initial symbols. A form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started by a combination of "5" and "6" is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is illustrated. ) Is set and the initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table by executing the start notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 207SG in the other embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-32, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the other invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the gaming effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R to 30. When the output sound A is output for a second and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It includes both performing the output of sound B.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated and the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Output of the output sound C of the above, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) for 40 seconds is executed on the image display device 5. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

Note that the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer of a game hall or a management device such as a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. As a start notification when the pachinko machine 1 is started, a signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, a part of the device that executes the start notification is common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device is used. When the message image is displayed in step 5 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a signal may be output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the setting changed. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but other inventions are not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines are not limited thereto. The activation notification of 1 may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. , Other inventions are not limited to this, and among these hot start notification commands, cold start notification commands, set value confirmation end notification commands, and set value change end notification commands, even if they are received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command may be provided that does not execute the activation notification of.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in another embodiment, as an initialization effect in another invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or a pachinko gaming game is performed. An example is shown in which a different combination of decorative symbols is displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the machine 1 is started, but other inventions are not limited to this, and these initializations are made. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols as an effect may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in the other embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Although the mode of executing the activation notification is illustrated in the above, the other inventions are not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start or is activated in a setting confirmation state, these The start notification may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (207SGS432). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIGS. 11-37, the effect control CPU 120 first has an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (207SGS441). If there is no power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information, player information, etc. stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 11-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for effect (207SGS435) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for effect such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (207SGS436) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (207SGS437) that outputs the person information and the effect information aggregation process (207SGS438) that aggregates the effect information are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. In addition, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server, thereby performing the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-38, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is set to -1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (207SGS452) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7), any of the processes is executed. By executing the processes of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 207SG in the other embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, resulting in four fluctuations. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated over the display, the other inventions are not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By not executing (see FIG. 5), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over the four variable displays.

As described above, the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment regulates the execution of the pre-reading notice effect over four variable displays based on the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. Although the embodiment is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game has become possible, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set as a setting related to the progress of the game. , The amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set as the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition, other embodiments also include the invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to preferably notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 207SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 11-22).
When the set state is set, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 11-23).
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in a confirmation state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 207SG,
The display recognizable as the set state or the confirmed state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-27). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed are displayed. Different part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in a set state or a confirmed state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 207SG,
In the set state or the confirmed state, the variable display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state or the confirmed state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). The part that lights all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the variable display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display that can recognize that it is in the set state or the confirmation state, a display is performed in which all of the small display units are lit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). The part that lights all the constituent segments)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 6 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a gaming medium into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 207SG002L and right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a launch direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the launch direction of the game medium in the game area.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the launch direction notification unit makes a display recognizable that the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A)). The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed by the launch direction notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 7 of the invention 207SG,
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) that can store information related to the variable display as hold information.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A)). A gaming machine characterized in that all segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked in the value change state or the set value confirmation state) is described. For example, a suitable notification can be performed on the hold display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing into a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state is provided.
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the setting is performed. Of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 in the value change state or set value confirmation state, only one segment is lit)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed by the number-of-times notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) that can store the state information (for example, the RAM clear flag) that can specify the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means, and
With
The game control means
The first condition (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. At this time, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 11-21 (A)) is performed. Feasible and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) are satisfied, the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial stage to be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The initialization process common to the conversion process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, the part where the RAM clear process and the set value change process can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process. Not part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the initialization process can be standardized when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

In addition, other embodiments also include the invention 208SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2010-2010902, there is a problem that it is not possible to preferably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 208SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 11-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (B)). If an error occurs more than the set value, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area in which a variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 208SG,
A gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or greater than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is described. It is possible to preferably notify that an error regarding the storage area in which is stored occurs and that the set value needs to be reset.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if there is no display that can identify the occurrence of an error in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (B), even when the power failure during the setting change is restored, the first display is performed. A part that blinks all the segments constituting the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurs before the set value is confirmed without setting a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that the above is true.

In addition, other embodiments also include the invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming a set value are used. There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are provided individually. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 209SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine that can play a game using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value adding means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 11-17 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can identify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which at least the set value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B)). When a setting value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (A) and 11-26 (B)). As shown in the above, in both the case of displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and the case of displaying the occurrence of an abnormal error, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display A gaming machine characterized by (part using part 207SG029D) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error related to a storage area in which a set value is stored has occurred, and also to provide information on the set value. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be independently lit (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each eight. Part made up of individual segments),
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the initialization condition (for example, the clear switch is ON), the information display means constitutes each display unit. All the display units are lit in the fully lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit are displayed. The part that repeats (blinks) all lighting and all extinguishing of all segments that make up the 207SG029D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 209SG,
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without the full lighting display state (for example,). As shown in FIG. 11-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after the execution of the 207SGSa015 and the 207SGSa016, the 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.

In addition, other embodiments also include the invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is changed, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirmation operation again after the operation of changing the set value is completed. In this case, when the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first confirmation operation of the movable body, the change operation is completed. There is a problem that the confirmation operation of the new movable body is started from the timing of the movement, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to a setting state in which the set value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, a clear switch and a lock switch are used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command, it is actually executed. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command and a setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, operation control at the time of non-detection) for causing the return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. It is feasible and can be executed before the control is executed.
When the set state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (for example, a first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process). In the part where the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed after the non-detection self-operation control is completed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 210SG,
When the set state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the control means sets the setting state or the setting state or the control means when the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control due to the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body is newly initialized after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control is executed by the end of the setting state or the confirmation state (the part). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command is completed, and the first movable body initialization process is completed. 2 If a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the movable body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly completed after the completion of the second movable body initialization process. The part that executes the movable body initialization process in order)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 210SG,
With the plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face-to-face initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control due to the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of, the first one is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, the set state or the confirmation state has ended. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process based on the above is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is performed. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the end of
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Although the feature portion 207SG in the other embodiments has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the other invention. Is also included in other inventions.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the like. Although the embodiment composed of the design display 207SG020, the general drawing hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 has been illustrated, other inventions are not limited thereto. , The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state). Although a mode in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the other inventions are not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether the setting value confirmation process is being executed or not. By doing so, depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. It is possible to inform the existence in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on, thereby making the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. 1 The display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and display modes of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state ( If the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004A It is not necessary to light some of the segments constituting the symbol display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. Illustrated a mode in which all segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked, but the other inventions are limited thereto. In the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are displayed. The blinking of all the constituent segments may not be executed or only a part of the blinking may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is a plurality of lights unless the combination corresponds to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 11-6. It may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been exemplified. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with LEDs for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is exemplified, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to this. The game machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or a temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the form for determining whether or not to execute is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. , The operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like may be determined.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The form of notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by setting the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the round which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. The display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game if it is possible to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. good.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The form of notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game. The invention is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As a process, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body has been illustrated, but the other inventions are not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the set value. From the time when the notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. Therefore, the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An embodiment has been exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but other inventions are limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, and the second hold display An explanation that the device 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are turned on or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk or the like of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is changed in 207SGSa021. The embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the middle flag is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and other inventions are not limited to this. In the RAM clear processing, it was determined that the RAM clear flag was set in 207SGSa014, not after the clear switch was determined to be ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag was cleared in 207SGSa021. It may be executed in the case (207SGSa014; Y).

(Explanation of feature 10F)
Next, the feature portion 10F will be described. The feature unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 12-1, the same processing as in FIG. 11-22 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 11-20, the RAM clear process was executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process (207SGa013b), no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in the 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. The feature unit 10F will be described on the premise that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa051). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 11-22 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 11-22 is executed.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 12-2, the same processing as in FIG. 11-23 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 12-1. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa101). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 11-23 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 12-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 11-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from the opening state to the closing state of the large winning opening door. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-cover opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is controlled in the open state and the closed state, and is provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change. In a V-probability gaming machine, the V-cover is opened in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. The area where the V-cover is open is called the V-winning area. The CPU 103 uses a V-cover opening time timer to measure the time from when the V-cover is opened to when it is closed. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed from the open state (winning in the large winning opening just before the closing of the large winning opening door). A game ball that has passed the switch) is also judged to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is determined to be valid by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses a fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

As other timers other than the above-mentioned timers, the CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating in the game stop start process (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not running (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the V-cover opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is operating (10FS018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not operating (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is operating (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timer is not running (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the start port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. Due to the other processing (10FS021), various processings are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-cover opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V-cover opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS030, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether or not the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other timer that is stopped is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the other timer is not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other processing (10FS041), various processings are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timekeeping of the inter-round interval period timer period is restarted based on the end. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the interval period between rounds in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the time counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the valid period of the electric chew open time timer. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The time counting of the period of the variable stop period timer is stopped, and the time counting of the period of the special figure variable stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes or additions within the range that does not deviate from the gist of other inventions, other Included in the invention. A modified example of the feature portion 10F will be described below.

We have described a gaming machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols (so-called first-class gaming machine), but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball winning (V-winning) in the special winning opening (V winning opening), and first and second types It may be applied to a gaming machine (a type / two type mixer) in which the above is combined. When the start winning prize to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is accepted by a special variable winning ball device for small hits in a small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, it is variable for big hits. The second-class jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also determined to be a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is completed. , The timekeeping of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls have been executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, even if the same control is executed even in the setting change state. good. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when the player is in a favorable state, and the various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timekeeping.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a jackpot display result or a missed display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player for the jackpot display result that is advantageous to the player, but the timer is not disadvantageous to the player for the off display result. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is favorable to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 10F)
As described above, the feature section 10F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature section 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 11F)
The following inventions may be included as the feature portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the feature portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
Further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to advance the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 13F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
Further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to advance the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of feature 40F)
Next, the feature unit 40F will be described. The feature unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise due to static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.

FIG. 13-1 is a diagram illustrating an effect control command in the feature unit 40F in another embodiment. In FIG. 13-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) described above. The commands added are command F1XXH and command F2XXXH. These commands are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of winning.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 13-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at predetermined timings by the CPU 103. Upon receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on the fluctuation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to display the variation of the displayed decorative pattern. Further, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constantly small symbol in a reduced form of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to constantly display the variation of the small symbol to be displayed.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As a symbol for variable display, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the normal symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is fluctuating, and is fluctuated by a constant operation in a manner that is always visible in a display device such as an image display device 5. Is displayed. By displaying the fourth symbol in a variable manner, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body displays all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a shielding effect is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

(About processing based on the designated command while the big winning opening is open)
During the jackpot game, a round game that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 into an open state (first state) that is advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to win the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the command designated during the opening of the big winning opening.

(About the processing based on the 1st start opening prize designation command and the 2nd start opening prize designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start port winning designation command, so that the first hold information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 is stored. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second start opening winning designation command, and is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on the symbol specification command and variation type specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a flash effect at the time of winning and a hold change effect at the time of winning based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The flash effect at the time of winning is an effect of emitting a lamp provided around the first starting port when a starting winning is generated. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a flash effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamps emit light in different modes depending on the degree of expectation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 emits red light when the jackpot expectation is high, and white light when the expectation is not so high. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the flash effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that control may be made so that sound is not output only by light emission.

The hold change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning is generated to a mode different from the usual one. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for the hold change effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest expectation of big hit, and the hold display is displayed in white in the normal mode in the case of losing the lottery or the deviation fluctuation without reach. .. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the hold change effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that the control may be performed so that the sound is not output only by the pending change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to emit light based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command to execute the pending change effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that only one of the flash effect at the time of winning and the pending change effect at the time of winning may be executed. Further, at the time of winning a prize, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by the output of the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the feature unit 40F will be described. FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 40F. In FIG. 13-2, the same processing as in FIGS. 11-29 is designated by the same reference numerals and a part of description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 13-2, the processes related to 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in FIGS. 11-29 are deleted, and the sub-side game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The setting value-related notification processing for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412). In the set value-related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value-related notification process in the 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3.

After the sub-side game stop process is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412 and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS427.

FIG. 13-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the feature unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 controls to display the variation of the decorative symbol or constantly display the variation of the small symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented from executing. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is received. If it is determined that the designated command has not been received while the large winning opening is open, the process proceeds to 40FS014. If it is determined that the designated command is received while the large winning opening is open, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for opening the big winning opening while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the image display device 5 from executing the winning hold change effect by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation type specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the effect control board 12 from a device that sends a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided in the gaming machine at the time of shipment from the factory. .. When transmitting a test command, various test commands are transmitted with a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command has been received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is determined by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal display of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the process based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 13-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the process ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). By discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect. After that, the process ends.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the variation pattern specification command, it discards the variation pattern specification command. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the big winning opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the big winning opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when controlled to the setting change state, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received while the setting is being changed, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as a winning lamp or an image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when controlled in the setting confirmation state, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command such as 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting to display the image notifying that the setting is in the setting change state is set, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Based on, set to display an image notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state. In this way, it can be shown that the control is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like It is possible to prevent the predetermined production means of the above from malfunctioning.

As shown in 40FS020 of FIG. 13-3, the control according to the test command is executed even when the setting is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In this way, even when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command can be executed.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes or additions within the range that does not deviate from the gist of other inventions, other Included in the invention. A modified example of the feature portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command reception buffer for each command to be transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of analyzing the commands in order and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the initialization command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when the control is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if an effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, the process based on the effect control command is not executed. explained. However, the process based on the reception of the effect control command while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be executed internally. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on receiving other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is displayed in appearance. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the channels other than the channel that outputs the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed. However, when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning have been described as a predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, an operating means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the gaming machine may be used as a predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operating means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, the command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if it is executed, the control for discarding the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than a command for terminating the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It may be controlled not to.

In the above-described embodiment, the lamp provided in the gaming machine may be made to emit light or sound may be output from the speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command is executed has been described. However, the advance notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when a command related to the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of a start winning prize, the command related to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted. The advance notice effect may be executed based on the above. In such a case, even if a command related to the fluctuation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the lottery for the advance notice to be executed may be executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various notices may not be executed by determining that the notice cannot be executed at the timing of actually determining whether or not the notice can be executed. In addition, when executing the look-ahead notice effect in the continuous fluctuation display other than the time of winning, the lottery of the notice is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the fluctuation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends at the timing when the notice is actually started, the notice based on the received command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the process of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to restrict the reception of another irregular command thereafter. good.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the other invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 100 game control microcomputer, 103 CPU, 120 effect control CPU.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play a game by firing a gaming medium and can control it in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation control means.
A variable means that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.
A predetermined game executing means capable of executing a predetermined game for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
A variable timekeeping means that measures the change period for changing the variable means to the first state, and
An ordinary variable display means that variably displays the ordinary identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area and derives and displays the display result.
Ordinary variable timekeeping means for timing the ordinary variable display period, which performs variable display of ordinary identification information,
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect according to the end of the advantageous state, and a notification effect execution means.
A notification timing means for measuring the notification period in which the notification effect is executed, and
Equipped with an external output means that can output a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine,
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state even when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing that can execute the processing related to the game is executed.
The interrupt process is executed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and after the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The setting confirmation state ends when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the change period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state. The timekeeping of the change period is interrupted until, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timekeeping of the change period is restarted.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time counting of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted.
The setting confirmation state ends when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the notification period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state. The timing of the notification period is interrupted until, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timing of the notification period is restarted.
The external output means can output the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state.
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the launch of the game medium is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images